Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EH69
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and
SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH69
model only.
DMR-EH59
Region number supported by
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD
Recorders and DVD-Video according to
where they are sold.
For Asia
≥The region number of this unit is “3”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “3” or “ALL”.
Example:
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of DMR-EH59 for New
Zealand.
2
3
3
ALL
5
For New Zealand
≥The region number of this unit is “4”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “4” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
3
4
ALL
4
For Middle East
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
3
2
ALL
5
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
About descriptions in these operating
instructions
≥These operating instructions are applicable to
models DMR-EH69 and DMR-EH59. Unless
otherwise indicated, illustrations in these
operating instructions are of DMR-EH59 for New
Zealand.
≥[EH69] : indicates features applicable to DMR-
EH69 only.
≥[EH59] : indicates features applicable to DMR-
EH59 only.
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.
RQT9274-L
GC GA GN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Editing
Getting started
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Copying
Quick Start Guide
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R and +R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Copying SD Video from an SD card [EH69] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Copying SD Video from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copying new still pictures on the SD card—Copy New Pictures
[EH69]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
About the Gracenote® Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/
DVD-R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
To update the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Regarding DivX® files, Music files and still pictures
(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . .15
Basic operations
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Timer recording using G-CODE system [For]New]Zealand] . . . .18
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Setting menus
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Deleting all the contents—Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Selecting the background style —Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment–Finalise . . . . . 56
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Advanced operations
Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . . 21
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 21
When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 24
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG). . . .28
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing Music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To pause the TV programme you are watching
Reference
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and
receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link
“HDAVI ControlTM”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
RQT9274
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of February 2009. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]
1 Remote control
[For]Asia]
1 RF coaxial cable
2 Batteries
for remote control
1 Audio/Video cable
2 AC mains leads
For Thailand
(N2QAYB000342)
[For]New]Zealand]
1 AC mains lead
[For]New]Zealand]
1 Remote control
[For]Middle]East]
2 AC mains leads
(N2QAYB000341)
For Saudi Arabia
For use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
The remote control information
∫ Batteries
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Remote control operations (> 6)
∫ Use
Remote control signal sensor
R6/LR6, AA
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
20
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
20
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
30
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Plays DivX® video
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under
license.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS 2.0 + Digital
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and
third parties.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
≥SDHC Logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
RQT9274
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling
fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
DO NOT
This unit
VCR
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving
from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa,
or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
DO NOT
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Note
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
RQT9274
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Start
Guide
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
e.g., [For]New]Zealand]
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH69])] (> 16, 17, 30)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unnecessary recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 19, 41)
TV
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Skip the specified time (> 26)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 26)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 27, 36)
9 Show OPTION menu (> 36)
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
: Select audio (> 26)
; Colour buttons
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 27, 30, 32)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 45)
– for manual tuning settings (> 57)
INPUT SELECT
8 9
0
7
– for deactivating timer programme (> 24)
< Show on-screen menu (> 52)
= Recording functions
-
G Code
DELETE
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 17)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 17)
≥[F Rec] Start Flexible Recording (> 22)
> Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 62)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
@ Channel select (> 17)
A Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (> 23)
B [For]New]Zealand] Show G-CODE screen (> 18)
C Exit the menu screen
D Show Timer Recording screen (> 24)
E Show FUNCTION MENU Display (> 33)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
F Return to previous screen
TIME SLIP
OK
G Create chapter (> 26)
H Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 26)
I Show status messages (> 53)
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
DISPLAY
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE F Rec
STATUS
The unit’s display
REC
[EH69]
PLAY
1 Copying indicator
2 Recording/Playback indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
Recording indicator
Playback
indicator
REC
REC
PLAY
PLAY
3 Timer recording indicator
4 [EH69] SD card slot indicator
5 Disc indicator
6 Drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH69])] indicator
7 Main display section indicator
8 Recording mode indicator
RQT9274
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
REC
[EH69]
Pull to flip down the front
panel.
REC
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
7 USB port (> 15)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
8 Stop (> 17, 26)
9 Start play (> 16)
: Channel select (> 17)
; Start recording (> 17)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 17)
< Remote control signal sensor
2 Disc tray (> 15)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (> 23)
4 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (> 23)
5 Display (> 6)
= [EH69] SD card slot (> 15)
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 63, 64, 65)
6 Open/Close disc tray (> 15)
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
Select when you wish to
play back the contents.
The DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
1Playback
Video (> 16, 27)
1
DivX (> 28)
OK
OK
Picture (> 30)
Music (> 29)
Top Menu (> 16)
Menu (> 16)
Press [OK].
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select the recording
method.
2Recording
Timer Recording (> 24)
[For]New]Zealand]
G-Code Record (> 18)
FUNCTION MENU
Select the title or file type
you wish to delete. The
DELETE Navigator screen
will be displayed.
3Delete
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Video (> 19)
Picture (> 41)
Music (> 41)
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
Select the copy method.
4Copy
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 44)
Advanced Copy (> 45)
Copy Music CD (> 50)
Copy Music (> 50)
Copy New Pictures ([EH69])
(> 49)
Copy
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording
or setting.
5Others
Playlists (> 38)
Flexible Rec (> 22)
DV Auto Rec (> 23)
HDD Management (> 54)
DVD Management (> 54)
Card Management ([EH69])(> 54)
Setup (> 57)
2
OK
OK
Change which drive is
used.
6Drive Select
Press [OK].
Select an item.
HDD
DVD
SD ([EH69])
USB
Note
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 60).
RQT9274
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 63) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[Approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
Connecting a television
To the aerial
To household mains socket
[For]New]Zealand]
Aerial cable
[For\Saudi\Arabia[
Television’s rear panel
BE SURE TO
READ THE
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
CAUTION FOR
THE AC MAINS
LEAD ON PAGE
2 BEFORE
R
L
CONNECTION.
RF coaxial cable
(included)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
(> 9, 63)
1 2
3
[For]Middle]East]
4
Use the AC mains lead that matches
the socket for the area you live in.
[For]Asia]
AC mains lead with a label is for
Thailand.
Audio/Video cable
(included)
AC mains lead without a label is for
areas other than Thailand.
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
Yo u can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
≥If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 60)
Required setting
RQT9274
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV on page 8 as follows.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [> 34, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
RF
IN
Y
HDMI AV OUT
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Required setting
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 60).(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
Note
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 78) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be
output.)
RQT9274
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
3 Press [2, 1] to select the item you
want to change.
TV
This is a 24-hour clock.
The items change as follows:
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy (> 61).
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
Numbered
buttons
INPUT SELECT
4 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
8 9
0
7
-
G
Code
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
DELETE
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
5 Press [OK] when you have finished
the settings.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”
when the “Power Save” setting menu
appears.
TIME SLIP
OK
Power Save
,,,
OPTION
RETURN
On
Off
OK
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
DISPLAY
REC MODE
MANUAL SKIP
On : Minimises standby power
consumption; disables Quick
Start function and
F
Rec
STATUS
≥On: It will go into the Power Save mode when the unit is
in standby mode.
1 Turn on the television and select the
≥Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as below.
On§1
Approx. 2 W
Not Quick
Power Save
Off
Approx. 8 W
Quick§2
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
Power consumption
Startup time
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link
(> 34), downloading from the television starts.
Watching the picture from Cannot do
the device connected to
AV2
Can do
Download from TV
§1
“
FL Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu. (
>
59)
§2
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
– Depending on the type of TV or the connected
terminal, it may take time to display the screen.
RETURN
TV aspect setting screen appears.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
[For]New]Zealand]
The country setting screen appears on the television.
4:3 TV
Pan & Scan
Country
Letterbox
Australia
New Zealand
Others
SELECT
OK
RETURN
7 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
Press [3, 4] to select the country and press [OK].
Pre-set channels are set when you select “Australia” in the
country setting menu.
Auto-Setup does not start. The clock setting menu
appears (> step 3). If your favourite channel is not
received after selecting “Australia”, perform “Auto-Setup
Restart” (> 58).
and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 78).
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 5 minutes.
≥Letterbox:
.
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 78)
Auto-Setup
1
Auto-Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
RETURN
correctly (> 57)
Auto-Setup is complete when you see the clock setting
menu.
∫ To restart setup (> 58)
Clock
Time
0
Date
1
:
00
:
00
.
1
.
2009
Number
0
9
RQT9274
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
SELECT
10
RETURN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Logo
–
Data that can Rewritable Play on other Recording 16:9 Recording both M 1
Copy-once
recording
(CPRM)
players§1
aspect picture§2
be recorded
and played
and M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§2
Standard symbol
Hard disk drive (HDD)
Video
Still picture
Music
≤
≤
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
[HDD]
DVD-RAM
Video
≤
≤
≤
[RAM]
Still picture
CPRM (> 78)
compatible
discs only.
§3
Video§5
or
–
DVD-R
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Video only)
–
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
–
(Either one)
Still picture§5
§3
DVD-R DL§4
–
Video
–
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Either one)
§3
DVD-RW
Video
≤
≤
≤
–
–
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Either one)
§3
+R
–
–
–
Video
Video
Video
–
–
≤
≤
– (4:3 aspect)
– (4:3 aspect)
– (4:3 aspect)
–
–
–
–
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Either one)
§3
+R DL§4
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
–
(Either one)
§3
+RW
[+RW]
≤
≤
–
(Either one)
§1
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Note
Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment (> 56).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and
DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on
secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this
setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. > 58).
≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with
another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,
discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
§2
For further information (> 20, Notes for recording)
The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 59) is
recorded.
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (@ right).
[-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.
§3
§4
§5
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (> 55).
≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu (> 56).
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the
recording.
≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate
recording times” (> 21).
≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent
you from playing or recording certain discs.
≥Please see specifications (> 76) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,
single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is
not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the
remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between
layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit
is switching layers.
∫ Recording format
This unit records video in the following formats.
DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit
television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
DVD-R DL
+R DL
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-
Video.
Second recordable layer
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.
≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and
other equipment.
The available
space
First recordable layer
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar
way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded.
Title 2
Title 1
(Inner section
(Outer section
of the disc)
Playback direction
of the disc)
≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the
disc on DVD players and other equipment.
RQT9274
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
Play-only discs
Disc type
Logo
Standard symbol
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-Video
[DVD-V]
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (> 55) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX/MP3/
WMA/
JPEG
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in WMA/MP3
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
CD
[CD]
–
DivX/MP3/
WMA/
JPEG
≥CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in WMA/MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG
≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)
Video CD
[VCD]
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit
and not finalised (> 78).
≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.
≥[For]Asia] DVD-Video with a region number other than “3” or “ALL”
≥[For]New]Zealand] DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or
“ALL”
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
Yes/No
≥[For]Middle]East] DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or
“ALL”
Multi-system TV
PAL
NTSC
PAL
≤
≥DVD-Audio
≥Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.
≤
PAL TV
≤
§1 (PAL60)
–
NTSC
PAL
≤
NTSC TV
§2
NTSC
≤
§1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 60).
§2
≥When playing back a disc or a title recorded on the HDD, ensure
that you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or the title (PAL
or NTSC) (> 60).
RQT9274
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP
protocol:
–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Format
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these instructions by [USB]
Data that can be played or copied (≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
File format
Playing
DivX
≤
WMA/MP3
Still pictures (JPEG)
≤
≤
≤
≤
Copying to HDD
Instructions
–
You can play DivX files recorded You can play and copy to HDD
with a computer onto the USB
You can play and copy to HDD or
DVD-RAM still pictures recorded
WMA/MP3 files recorded with a
memory (> 28).
computer onto the USB memory with a computer onto the USB
(> 29, 50). memory (> 30, 48).
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to
this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
Note
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit [EH69]
SD Memory Card§ (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
MultiMediaCard
Type
§
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these
instructions by
[SD]
Data that can be recorded
and played
Still pictures (JPEG)
Video (SD Video)
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (> 30, 48).
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 47)
≥SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.
Structure of folders
¢¢¢: Numbers
XXX: Letters
Suitable SD cards
≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display
the SDHC logo can be used.
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
Card
DCIM
(This site is in English only.)
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
These folders are shown
earlier in the Album View
screen than other still
picture folders.
≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary
for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a
PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases,
format the card on this unit (> 55, 78).
≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card
Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC
Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
(Picture folder)
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
(Any folder with JPEG files)
e.g.,
001
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD
card.
P0000001.JPG
P0000001.JPG
SD_VIDEO
PRGꢀꢀꢀ
(MPEG2 folder)
MOVꢀꢀꢀ.MOD
MOVꢀꢀꢀ.MOI
PRGꢀꢀꢀ.PGI
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
RQT9274
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX® files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-
R DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a
lot of sessions.
DivX
Playable [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
media
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks)
may not display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order
you numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be
played.
File
format
DivX
≥Files must have the
extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,
“.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
of folders (including the root folder)
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
Number
of files
Support
version
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
–Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG
multi is 2 ch conversion.
≥This unit is not compatible with copy-protected, Lossless,
Professional, Voice and Multiple Bit Rate (MBR) for WMA.
≥This unit is not compatible with WMA files protected with digital
rights management (DRM).
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§4
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
WMA/MP3
Playable
media
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (WMA/MP3) and still pictures (JPEG)
on this unit by making folders as shown below. However
depending on the method of writing data (writing software),
play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
File format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
WMA (Windows Media-formatted file)
≥Files must have the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Structure of WMA/MP3
folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
the order you want to play
them.
e.g. Structure of MP3 folders
Number of
folders
(groups or
albums)
Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)
recognizable: 300 folders (groups or albums)
(including the root folder)
Root
(folder=group)
001
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1
3000 files (tracks)
:
Number of
files (tracks)
≥The file name extension of
WMA files will be “.wma”.
002 group
001track.mp3
003 group
Bit rates
(MP3)
32 kbps to 320 kbps
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Sampling
frequency
(MP3)
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
Order of play
For WMA
This unit is compatible with Windows Media
Audio 9 (WMA9).
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order they
were updated or taken.
ID3 tags
compatible ([HDD] [USB])
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
WMA tags
002 Folder
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a WMA/
MP3 file, play may not be possible.
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
Still pictures (JPEG§2
)
Playable
media
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
[SD]
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
File format
File format: JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
004 Folder
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Number of
pixels
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Order of play
Number of
folders§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
recognizable: 300 folders
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders
[RAM]
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
§1
Still pictures on the root
Root
ꢁ1
folder can also be
displayed.
Folders can be created
Number of
files§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1: 3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
JPEG
§2
DCIMꢀꢀꢀ
on other equipment.
However, these folders
cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
MOTION
JPEG
Not supported
≥If a folder name or file
name has been input
using other equipment,
the name may not be
displayed properly or you
may not be able to play or
edit the data.
PROGRESSIVE
JPEG
ꢁ2
DCIM
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
§1
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, WMA, JPEG,
DivX and other types of files is 4000.
It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
§2
§3
RQT9274
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Inserting discs
Disc and card care
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
∫ How to hold a disc or card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up with the arrow
facing in.
DO
DO NOT
Insert label-up.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
Insert fully.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Automatic drive select function
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to
“PROTECT” (> 54, Cartridge-protection and Card-protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD]
DO
DO NOT
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
∫ Handling precautions
Note
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc
from the cartridge.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
≥[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (> 54), play automatically starts when inserted in
the unit.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
DO NOT
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 28, 49).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
Inserting, removing the SD card [EH69]
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the
card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSD card or a
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor
that comes with the
card.
e.g., miniSD
ADAPTER
Insert and remove
this adaptor from the
unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
Press on the centre of the card.
Pull it straight out.
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”
screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the
SD drive (> 28, 49).
RQT9274
≥If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operations
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 26) for detail
may not always be able to control play as described in these
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (> 60).
information.
2
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V]
REC
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
3
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [5]
15:
[1] @ [5]
TV
VOL
CH
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
1
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
Numbered
buttons
[VCD]
Press [RETURN].
INPUT SELECT
8 9
0
7
-
G
Code
DELETE
Note
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when
you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your
television screen and so on.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
3
TIME SLIP
OK
,,,
OK
OPTION
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
DISPLAY
REC MODE
MANUAL SKIP
F
Rec
STATUS
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [VCD]
Play starts from the points specified by the disc.
[CD]
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
Menu operation for other type of contents
≥DivX (> 28)
≥WMA/MP3(> 29)
≥Still pictures (JPEG) (> 30)
≥Music on HDD (> 32)
≥Music CD (> 32)
Note
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” (> 60) may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording. You
will be able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in
that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back
the settings before the recording starts.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,
pictures, sound, etc. to start.
RQT9274
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 20) and “Advanced
recording” (> 21) for detail information.
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
REC
2
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
REC
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(> 58), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)
3 5
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
1
2 3
1
CH
3
4 5 6
INPUT SELECT
∫ To pause recording
Numbered
buttons
8 9
0
7
Press [;].
-
G
Code
DELETE
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
TIME SLIP
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
OK
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary
to finalise them (> 56).
In order to play +RW on other players, we recommend you to
create a top menu. (> 56)
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
DISPLAY
REC MODE
MANUAL SKIP
AUDIO
F
Rec
STATUS
≥[USB] It is not possible to record on a USB memory.
≥[SD] It is not possible to record on a card.
≥Video cannot be recorded to DVD-R discs with JPEG images
already recorded on them.
5
4
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Preparation
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
the recording time.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 18, 24) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 22).
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To select with the numbered
HDD
buttons:
e.g.,
To cancel
5:
[0] @ [5]
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
15: [-/--] @[1] @ [5]
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
continues.
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥Recording modes and approximate recording times (> 21)
Recording Mode
Rec Mode
XP
Remain
47:47
95:34
191:11
381:16
SP
LP
EP
SELECT
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (> 59).
RQT9274
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording using G-CODE system [For]New]Zealand]
Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (> 24–25) for
detail information.
3 Press [OK].
1:58 SP
TUE 18.08.09. 12:54:00
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
HDD
TV
Channel Date
Start
19:00
Stop
20:00
Mode
SP
DVD
HDD
1
ARD 25. 8.TUE
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 24, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Channel” column, you cannot
set timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired
programme position. After you have entered the information
of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
2
INPUT SELECT
8 9
0
7
-
G
Code
DELETE
1
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
4 Press [OK].
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
TIME SLIP
No. Channel
01
3, 4
OK
Timer icon
ARD
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
DISPLAY
REC MODE
MANUAL SKIP
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
F
Rec
STATUS
standby has been activated.
TUE 18.08.09 12:56:00
Drive
HDD
space
Mode
SP
Stop
20:00
DVD
Check to make sure “OK”
HDD
OK
is displayed (> 25).
Programme
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (> 24)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(> 24)
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(> 15).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 61).
∫ Notes on timer recording (> 24)
G-CODE is a registered trademark of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The
G-CODE system is manufactured under
license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You can
find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.
1 Press [G-Code].
1:58 SP
G-Code
Record
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
TUE 18.08.09. 12:53:00
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
the G-CODE number.
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
RQT9274
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting titles
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
TV
1
While stopped
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
DRIVE SELECT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
INPUT SELECT
8 9
0
7
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video” and
-
G
Code
DELETE
DELETE
press [OK].
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
,
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
4
TIME SLIP
10.10.
11.10.
2
EXIT
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Page 02/02
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
Next
OPTION
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
2, 3, 4,
5, 6
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
DISPLAY
REC MODE
MANUAL SKIP
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
F
Rec
STATUS
and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (> 36,
step 4).
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
5 Press [OK].
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 54, Setting the protection).
6 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
The title is deleted.
∫ Available disc space after deleting
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
≥[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles
Deleting during play
Available
disc space
......
Last title
recorded
Title
Title
1
While playing
Press [DELETE ¢].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Available disc space
increases after deleting
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
Title
Title
Title
Later recorded
titles
Deleted
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
RQT9274
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced
operations
Notes for recording
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
When recording a
bilingual programme
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(> 26, Changing audio during play)
(> 59, Bilingual Audio Selection)
However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (> 59, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The
default setting is “On”. > 58)
M 1
Hello
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
M 2
M 1
Hello
Hallo
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
If you record from external equipment
– Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)
The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect.
About the aspect when
recording a programme
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” > 58),
the programme will be recorded in the original aspect
used when recording started (including when
recording started at a commercial, etc.). If recorded
with a different aspect, select the correct aspect
(“16:9” or “4:3”).
[+R] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
However, in the following cases, programme will be
recorded in 4:3.
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded
in 4:3 aspect.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. > 58)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings
(@ above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
HDD
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (> 78) compatible DVD-RAM.
When recording the
“One time only
recording” broadcasts
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD]
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (> 56).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
/I
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
;
1
:/
/9
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE
SEARCH
R
ENTE
V
O
L
LA
Y
DISP
U
MEN
T
OP
RN
RETU
U
ON
MEN
OFF
D
C
I
N
9
V
OPEN
D
ROUN
UR
A
T
Finalise
A.S
E
REPE
T
OR MOD
MONI
MODE
PICTURE
[+RW]
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 56).
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
and +R DL
≥It is not possible to record to both the HDD and the DVD drive simultaneously.
RQT9274
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
Recording Mode
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)
[EH59]
(250 GB)
[EH69]
(320 GB)
Single-
Double-
sided§1
(9.4 GB)
sided
(4.7 GB)
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
55 hours
71 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
SP (Standard
recording mode)
110 hours
221 hours
441 hours
142 hours
284 hours
567 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
LP (Long
recording mode)
EP (Extra long
8 hours
16 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
recording mode)§4 (331 hours§2
)
(426 hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(12 hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2
)
FR (Flexible
Recording
Mode)§4
441 hours
maximum
567 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent
to LP mode.
maximum
for one side
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP ( 6Hours )” in the Setup menu (> 58).
The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
[HDD]
≥You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP ( 8Hours ) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
REC
When removing a recorded disc
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Format
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
Yes
No
SELECT
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
RETURN
OK
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (> 56), “Auto-Play Select” (> 56) or
“Disc Name” (> 54) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents—Format” (> 55)
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9274
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
[HDD]
To stop timer recording
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.
2 seconds after play stops
1
2
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
If you try to record a 90-minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30-minute balance will not
get recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
and press [OK].
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
To stop play
Press [∫].
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording/To stop timer recording
After play stops
1
2
3
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
Press [∫].
If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
Necessary space for recording
[2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
Preparation
Note
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
1
While stopped
Press [F Rec].
Flexible Rec
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP ( 8Hours ) mode.
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Start
Cancel
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
3
When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].
≥Recording starts.
XP
SP
LP
EP
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
e.g., HDD
HDD
REC 0:59
ARD
M 1 / M 2
L R
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
Remaining
time of
recording
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS].
RQT9274
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.
REC
Preparation
This unit
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (@ left).
Turn on the main unit.
2
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S VIDEO
DV IN
AV3 IN
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 60).
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording to
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
S Video
cable§1
Audio/Video
cable§2
start.
The following screen appears.
Other video equipment
DV Auto Rec
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Cancel
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
SELECT
§1
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
RETURN
OK
VIDEO terminal.
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
§2
≥When the screen is not displayed
After performing step 1
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (> 59).
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
1
2
3
4
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].
@Go to step 3 (@ below)
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 58) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 58) of the Setup menu.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”
About the aspect when recording a programme (> 20)
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
Note
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
≥If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
press [OK].
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Recording starts.
Preparation
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic
recording.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (> 20, Notes for recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 60).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Note
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (> 53).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
≥
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (@ left).
2 Start play on the other equipment.
3
When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥Using Flexible Recording (> 22), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
RQT9274
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
1
While the unit is on
Preparation
Press [∫].
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording (
Stop Recording
≥
>
15).
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 61).
Manually programming timer
recordings
Cancel
Stop Recording
SELECT
RETURN
OK
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
Recording” and press [OK].
1:58 SP
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
TUE 18.08.09. 12:53:00
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
HDD
Drive
No. Channel
01
Date
15. 7.TUE
Start Stop
20:00
DVD Mode
space
HDD
19:00
SP
OK
ARD
New Timer Programme
To release the unit from recording
standby
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [OK].
3 Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1:58 SP
TUE 18.08.09. 12:54:00
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
HDD
Channel Date
Start
Stop
22:30
Mode
DVD
HDD SP
and press the “Red” button.
1
ARD 25. 8. TUE 22:00
≥The timer icon “F” (> 25) disappears from the timer
recording list.
Programme Name
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (> 25) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop
(Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Channel (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
[. Date:
Notes on timer recording
Current date up to one month later minus
one day
l
≥When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a
different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is
changed in the Setup menu (> 60) or the timer recording has
completed or has been cancelled.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (> 43).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
;:
l
Daily timer:
SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
l
;:
l
a.
Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 27) except when using
Auto Renewal Recording.
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (> 25, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 25)
ON!)OFF
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].
(> 42, Entering text)
Recorded
Recorded
4 Press [OK].
≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap, the
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
No. Channel
01
Timer icon
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
TUE 18.08.09 12:56:00
Drive
HDD
space
Mode
SP
Stop
20:00
DVD
Check to make sure “OK”
HDD
OK
is displayed (> 25).
Programme
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
RQT9274
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check, change or delete a programme
Relief Recording
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes were relief-
Icons
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (> 27).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
F
[
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
Auto Renewal Recording
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
X
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
(> right).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
column.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
1:58 SP
TUE 18.08.09. 12:53:00
Timer
Remain
Date
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
1:58 SP
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
HDD
Start Stop DVD
Drive
TUE 18.08.09. 12:53:00
No. Channel
Mode
space
New Timer Programme
HDD
DVD
RENEW
ON
Channel Date
ARD
SUN
Start
22:00
Stop
Mode
SP
1
22:30 HDD
Programme Name
Note
Press OK to store new programme.
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
OK
RETURN
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made
(up to a maximum of one month from the
present time) based on the time remaining on
the disc.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
≥The timer programme is deactivated.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> 24,
step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9274
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
Skipping
the
Operation during play
≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
and press [OK].
specified
time (Time
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by
1 minute intervals. (Press and hold for
10-minute intervals.)
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Stop
Slip)
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]
(This function
does not work
with finalised
discs.)
Stopped position
This automatically disappears after
approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen
again press [TIME SLIP] again.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared in some cases.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[CD] [VCD] and WMA/MP3/DivX : The position
is cleared if the unit is turned off.
-5 min
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Pause
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [] or [].
Search
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search
forward.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts
approximately 1 minute later.
Manual
Skip
[HDD] [RAM]
[CD] and WMA/MP3: Audio is heard during all
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]
(This function
does not work
with finalised
discs.)
levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of
search.
During play or while paused, press
Skip
[:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to
play.
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning
of the title currently playing.
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a
chapter.
Create
Chapter
(> 36, Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or
Starting
from a
track.
selected
≥[HDD]
e.g.,
5: [0] @ [0] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [1] @ [5]
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
title
≥WMA/MP3 and JPEG
e.g.,
5: [0] @ [0] @ [0] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [0] @ [1] @ [5]
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
^---------------}
HDD
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
PLAY
5: [0] @ [5]
15: [1] @ [5]
L R
≥This works only when
e.g., “L R” is selected
stopped (the screen on the
[DVD-V]
right is displayed on the television) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while
stopped (the above screen is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play
time appears on the unit’s display.)
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (> 52, Soundtrack).
1 ENG
Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Quick
Play speed is quicker than normal.
View
Note
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 59).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting
is “On” > 58).
[HDD] [RAM]
While paused, press [] or [].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [] only.
Slow-
motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V]
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is
continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused, press [2] (2;) or
Frame-by-
[1] (;1).
frame
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
forward or backward.
[+R]
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
[+R]DL] [+RW]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
[DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
RQT9274
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You
can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles
VIDEO
009
PICTURE
MUSIC
HDD
007
008
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
ARD 18.10. SAT
- - -
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
OK
Select Previous
Next
OPTION
RETURN
and press [OK].
(in Thumbnail Display)
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles
screen only).
e.g., [HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
To sort the titles for easy searching
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [5]
5:
[0] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [1] @ [5]
115: [1] @ [1] @ [5]
15: [1] @ [5]
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
(Thumbnail Display only)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback
of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles
continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to
another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be
cancelled.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
To play grouped titles [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].
t
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(> 25, Relief Recording)
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (> 78,
CPRM)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
≥Press [;] to cancel.
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
([HDD] only)
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press
Create Group
Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
Release Grouping
(NTSC)
(PAL)
[OK].
unit.
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(> 60).
Release Grouping:
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
appearance
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group
are released.
≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from
the group.
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
∫ Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
VIDEO
e.g.,
10.10.
Chantal Show
11.10.
Dolphines
2
ARD 11.10. SAT
Dolphines
ARD 18.10. SAT
Dolphines
Table Display
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”
All Titles
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
PICTURE/MUSIC
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OK
Next
OPTION
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.
To change the group name
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
Enter the name. (> 42, Entering text)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
10.10.
11.10.
2
Chantal Show
Dolphines
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Note
Page 02/02
OK
RETURN
Next
OPTION
This function is only available for Videos and not available for music
or still pictures.
(in Thumbnail Display)
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
RQT9274
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
≥Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
Playing DivX video contents
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Showing the menu screen
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official
DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
1
2
Insert the disc.
If the disc contains different file types
e.g., [CD]
Disc
1 Show DivX Menu screen.
Play Video ( DivX
)
(@ left, Showing the menu screen)
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Folder1
:
00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
No.
001
Title Name
Tree
ABC.avi
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
Otherwise,
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Page
001/001
Total Title : 001
OK
RETURN
[USB] [SD]
1 Insert the USB memory or the SD card.
≥Files are treated as titles.
USB device
SD Card
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
SELECT
RETURN
OK
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [5]
15:
[0] @ [1] @ [5]
RETURN
OK
To stop playing
Press [∫].
You can also display the above menu screen with the following
steps.
1Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, then press [OK].
3Press [3, 4] to select “USB” or “SD”, then press [OK].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
∫ Changing the file type to play
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
1 Press [RETURN] several times to exit the menu.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Note
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive
or the DVD drive.
FUNCTION MENU
CD(DivX)
Playback
DivX
Picture
Music
Recording
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Copy
Others
1 While the file list is displayed
Drive Select
OK
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
RETURN
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Folder
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
F
1/21
1Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
[OK].
2Press [3, 4] to select file type and press
[OK].
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
DATA2
[USB]
OK
RETURN
1Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
2Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press
The file list for the folder appears.
[OK].
3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[OK].
RQT9274
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX VOD content
Playing Music files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play WMA/MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-
R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD
content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the
message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content
will not play.]
≥
You cannot play MP3 or WMA files on the USB memory while recording or
copying.
1 Show MP3&WMA Menu screen.
(> 28, Showing the menu screen)
Selected group
No.
Group
My favorite
Track
001 Both Ends Freezing
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint ItYellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starperson
MP3&WMA Menu
CD
Display the unit’s registration code.
(> 61, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
1
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
G: Group No.
G
T
1
1
Tree
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL:
Track No./Total tracks in
all groups
TOTAL
1/111
DivX Registration
Setup
Number
DivX (R) Video On Demand
0
–
9
Tuning
Prev.
Next
8 alphanumeric characters
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
8
Disc
SELECT
9
10
009 Velvet Cuppermine
010 Ziggy Starfish
Picture
Sound
Display
OK
Music Type
RETURN
Page 001/024
MP3
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
Connection
Others
OK
RETURN
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [0] @ [5]
15:
[0] @ [0] @ [1] @ [5]
To stop playing
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
Using the tree screen to find a group
– you press [Í].
– you press [∫].
1 While the file list is displayed
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [:] or [, ] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
MP3&WMA Menu
Tree
CD
MP3 music
G
T
8
G
7/25
14
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
TOTAL
40/111
Number
You cannot select
groups that contain no
compatible files.
0
–
9
SELECT
OK
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
RETURN
002 Vocal
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9274
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
∫ Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 40).
Playing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
[HDD] [RAM]
Grouped by date
≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
002
≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, removing the SD card [EH69] (> 15)
Total 68
Date: 10.10. 2007
1 Show Album View screen.
Number of pictures/Shooting date
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
(> 28, Showing the menu screen)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]
Album
[HDD] [RAM]
002
While stopped
1
2
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”
button to select “PICTURE”.
10.10. 07
Zoological park
Total 24
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
Album View screen
MUSIC
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
VIDEO
- - -
PICTURE
≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC
etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
001
002
Regarding Album View
screen @ right
Total
Date: 1. 1.2006
5
Total
Date: 1. 2.2006
3
- - -
- - -
- - -
Page 01/01
OPTION
Previous
Next
OK
Press OK to show
pictures.
Slideshow
RETURN
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [OK].
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [1] @ [5]
115: [1] @ [1] @ [5]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
e.g., HDD
PICTURE
Album Name 103__DVD
0001
0005
0009
0002
0006
----
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
Slideshow
OPTION
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [0] @ [5]
115: [0] @ [1] @ [1] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [0] @ [1] @ [5]
1115: [1] @ [1] @ [1] @ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 31)
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9274
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start Slideshow
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
Slideshow Setting
You can also start Slideshow with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Setting” and press [OK].
3 Set required settings and press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Setting
≥To change the display interval
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval” in step 3.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (“Normal”, “Long” or “Short”).
≥Repeat Play
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” in step 3.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.
∫ Slideshow with music
You can add music to Slideshow.
Slideshow Setting
Please set the following items.
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack” in step 3 (@ above).
Press [2, 1] to select “On”.
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of soundtrack and press
[OK].
Display interval
Repeat Play
Normal
On
Soundtrack
On
Select Soundtrack
Album001
Cancel
5
Press [3, 4] to select an album for soundtrack and press [OK].
Set
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Note
≥Music albums on HDD and on USB memory can be used as the slideshow Soundtrack. However, when
selecting still images on USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the USB memory cannot be used
as the soundtrack. (Even if a music album on USB memory is selected, the music is not played.)
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
OK
[OK].
RETURN
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date
≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information
may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press
[OK].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
RETURN
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.
While playing
e.g., HDD
Press [STATUS] twice.
Properties
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.
3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS].
Shooting date
RQT9274
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Useful functions during music play
Operations during play
To play music CD
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared.
1 Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
≥The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
CD
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Play Music
Copy Music
Press [] or [].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Search
SELECT
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
RETURN
OK
During play or while paused, press [:] or
[9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Skip
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (> 50)
and searches for the title information.
You can select the item which you want to repeat.
Repeat
P O W E R E D B Y
Play
While playing
[HDD]
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”
and press [OK].
3
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
You can change the order of the Album View
alphabetically.
Sort
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
[HDD]
While Album View screen is displayed
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and
press [OK].
press [OK].
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].
5:
[0] @ [5]
15: [1] @ [5]
While Track View screen is displayed
1
2
Properties
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press
[OK].
[HDD] [CD]
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback continues.
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
To play music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD (> 50)
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and
press [OK].
You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [1] @ [5]
115: [1] @ [1] @ [5]
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [0] @ [5]
115: [0] @ [1] @ [1] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [0] @ [1] @ [5]
1115: [1] @ [1] @ [1] @ [5]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Note
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
RQT9274
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
FUNCTION MENU window
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu,
FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power
on. (> 60)
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
2 Turn on this unit and press [W X CH]
Copy
to select the channel.
Others
Drive Select
3
When you want to pause the TV programme
OK
RETURN
Press [;].
HDD
ꢂ
2 Press [3, 4] to select a function and
ARD
L
R
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
Copy
Others
This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can
turn off this icon (> 59, Pause Live TV Icon).
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
4
When you want to resume
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
Press [1] (PLAY).
screen.
≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode
(> 21) regardless of the recording mode and the drive
selected before starting saving.
3 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending
on the HDD free space.)
press [OK].
≥Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION
MENU Display” about each function. (> 7)
Operation during Pause Live TV
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [, ].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Search
Pause
Press [;].
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
≥Press again to return to the normal speed.
Quick View
While paused, press [] or
Slow-
motion
[].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
Stop Pause
Live TV
Note
≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
– when the clock is not set
– while recording
– while timer recording
≥Audio cannot be switched during resume play.
≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.
≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after
started.
RQT9274
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation
1
2
3
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (> 9) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (> 64).
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 60). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as “HDAVI Control”.
4
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”
function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data etc. are automatically copied from
Download from the
TV§3
the TV to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same
order as on the TV (> 10).
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [G-Code]§5, [PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off)
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [G-Code]§5, [PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and WMA/MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed, during playback
or when the unit is set to a timer recording.
Power off link
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when
recording, copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,
the receiver will also turn off.
About the Standby Power Save function§4
Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” (> 61) (Quick Start mode), this unit turns to “Power Save” states
(> 10) when Power off link works, so it is possible to reduce the power consumption while this unit is in
standby mode.
≥“Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the TV.
≥When turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save”
states.
Direct TV Recording§3
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operation.
≥The titles are recorded to the HDD.
≥Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work if you select the
TV channels on this unit.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [] to go back to where playback started.
§3 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
§4 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 4”.
§5 Only for New Zealand.
Note
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9274
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Using the FUNCTION
FUNCTION MENU
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window
MENU window to
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
using the TV remote control.
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
operate this unit
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
≥About the FUNCTION MENU window (> 7, 33).
≥This function is available with the
TV that supports “HDAVI Control
2” or later.
Copy
Others
Drive Select
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
remote control, and press [OK].
OK
RETURN
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD.
This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be
deleted.
Pause live TV
programme
≥This function is available with the
TV that supports “HDAVI Control
3” or later.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
≥This unit turns on automatically.
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (@ below) and press [OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
Refer to “Note”. (> 33, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”)
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (@ below) and display the
Using the OPTION
menu window to
operate this unit
Top Menu for DVD-Video.
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed
(@ below).
1 Press [OPTION].
e,g.,
≥This function is available with the
TV that supports “HDAVI Control
2” or later.
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (@ above).
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Top Menu
[DVD-V]
Top menu is displayed (> 16).
Menu
Drive Select
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed (> 16).
OK
RETURN
Drive Select
Select the HDD, DVD or SD
drive
Note
Rotate RIGHT
(JPEG)
Rotate the still picture (> 31).
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while
DVD-Video is being copied.
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Enlarge or shrink the still
picture (> 31).
Zoom out (JPEG)
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote
Using the Control
Panel
control.
Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit”
(@ above).
The Control Panel is displayed (@ right).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
Control Panel
– [3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward,
[OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
Pause
Stop
Exit
≥While playing still pictures
Search
Play
Search
– [4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit
the screen.
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 60).
RQT9274
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Editing titles/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalized discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
and press [OK].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
Chapter
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Refer to “Title
operations”
(> 37).
Partial Delete
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Delete
Properties
Edit
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (> 38).
Create Group
Release Grouping
Chapter View
Table Display
All Titles
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 27)
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 58)
“Automatic”:
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of
the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter
start points on them automatically.
@ below
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
appearance (> 27)
PICTURE/MUSIC
≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording
≥Playing still pictures (> 30)
≥To play music recorded on HDD
(> 32)
Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.
“5 minutes”:
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5 minute interval.
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
– Titles: 499
– Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
– Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
chapter.
To start play @ Press [OK].
To edit @ Step 6.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD
Chapter View screen
VIDEO
008 ARD 11.10.
0:31.24
Note
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
---
≥To show -o-- ther--p- ages/Multiple editing (@ above)
6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
the operation and press [OK].
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (> 37).
Combine Chapters
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
Title View
≥You can go back to Title View.
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 54, Setting the protection).
1
During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, Press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
Title View screen
MUSIC
VIDEO
PICTURE
008
10.10.
ARD
11.10.
ARD .
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Page 02/02
OK
Next
OPTION
RETURN
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
3 Press [OPTION].
RQT9274
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> 36)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 19).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Channel ARD
You can give names to recorded titles.
(> 42, Entering text)
≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
Enter Title Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titl
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Cancel Protection§
007
008
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
Partial Delete
VIDEO
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Start
End
(@ below, For your reference)
Next
Finish
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.
0:43.21
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
Change Thumbnail
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
VIDEO
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ꢂ
008
Change
Finish
(@ below, For your reference)
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the
point you want to change.
0:00.00
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
Change
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
You can divide a title into two.
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Divide Title
VIDEO
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Preview
Divide
(@ below, For your reference)
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
Finish
To confirm the division point
0:43.21
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the
title.
Note
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 78) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–6 (> 36)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (@ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
[HDD] [RAM]
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
VIDEO
Create Chapter
HDD
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
Create
Finish
(@ below, For your reference)
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
0:43.21
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use Search (> 26), Time Slip (> 26) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 26) and Frame-by-frame (> 26).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT9274
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating, editing and playing playlists
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
You can arrange the chapters (> 36) to create a playlist.
press [OK].
Title
Title
FUNCTION MENU
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
Recording
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Copy
Others
Drive Select
OK
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
Copying (> 43) a playlist will create a title.
and press [OK].
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
Playlists
HDD
- -
Playlist View
- -
- -
Create
- -
- -
- -
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
– Playlists: 99
– Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to
step 7.
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Creating playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Preparation
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
---
OK
OPTION
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 54, Setting the protection).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (> 60).
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
[OK].
Press [3] to cancel.
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
1
While stopped
002
002
---
---
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
press [OK].
OK
OPTION
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]
(> 37, Create Chapter).
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
OK
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9274
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playlist operations
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
1
While stopped
[HDD] [RAM]
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Make certain before proceeding.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
Properties
press [OK].
is shown.
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Properties
press [OK].
Dinosaur
No.
10
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
RETURN
OK
playlist.
To start play @ Press [OK].
(> 38, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)
To edit @ Step 5.
Create
[HDD] [RAM]
Playlists
HDD
01
Playlist View
- -
Playlist View screen
- -
Copy§
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[OK].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
12.10. SUN 0:30
- -
Create
- -
[HDD] [RAM]
- -
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 36)
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
You can give names to playlists.
(> 42, Entering text)
Enter
Name
[HDD] [RAM]
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
(> 37, Change Thumbnail)
Change
Create
Thumbnail
Copy
[HDD] [RAM]
Refer to “Playlist
Enter Name
Delete
Properties
Edit
operations”.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Change Thumbnail
Chapter operations
Chapter View
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (@ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
(> 38, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)
Add
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Chapter
chapter.
To start play @ Press [OK].
To edit @ Step 7.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [OK].
Move
Chapter
Playlists
HDD
Chapter View
Chapter View screen
Playlists
HDD
Move Chapter
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
002
001
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:10.24
0:19.36
0:10.24
0:19.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show -o-- ther pages/Multiple editing (> 36)
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
OK
RETURN
(> 37, Create Chapter)
Create
Add Chapter
Chapter
Move Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Create Chapter
(> 37, Combine Chapters)
Combine
Chapters
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
(> 37, Delete Chapter)
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Delete
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
Chapter§
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
§
Multiple editing is possible.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9274
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures and music
≥Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
Album (still picture) and picture
operation
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG) [SD]
After performing steps 1–3 (@ left)
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
Delete
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-
RW and USB memory.
Picture§
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are
Delete
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalized DVD-R.
Album§
before proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
the still picture files inside the album will
[-R] (JPEG) [SD]
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (> 54, Setting the protection).
also be deleted. (This does not apply to
folders under the album concerned.)
≥[-R] Available space does not increase even
after pictures are deleted.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
You can change the date of the picture.
1Press [2, 1] to select the item
and press [3, 4] to change.
2Press [OK].
Change
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Date§
2
Editing an album:
[HDD] [RAM]
Select the album to be edited and
press [OPTION].
You can give names to albums.
(> 42, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not
be displayed on other equipment.
Enter Album
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
Name
press [OPTION] without selecting album.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Editing a still picture:
If set, this will protect
Set up
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pic
the still picture or
album from
accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to
select “Yes”
and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the still
picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this
unit to protect an album, the album may be
deleted by another unit.
1Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [OK].
2Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
Protection§
Cancel
HDD
103__
Album Name
0001
0002
0006
Protection§
0005
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
[SD]
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start”
or “Yes” and press [OK].
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select
the album that contains the
still picture you want to add
and press [OK].
Add
∫ To edit the album
Pictures
Create
(e.g., [HDD])
Useful functions during still picture
play (> 31)
Album
Start Slideshow
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Slideshow Setting
3Press [3, 4] to select the item
and press [OK].
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Copy to DVD
Delete Album
Change Date
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:
Select the still picture you want to add
and press [OK].
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:
All the still pictures in the album will be
copied.
VIDEO/MUSIC
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or
Album (still picture) and picture
operation (@ right)
“No” and press [OK].
≥If you want to continue copying, select
“Yes” and go to step 2.
∫ To edit still picture
(e.g., [HDD])
Only for “Create Album”
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or
Delete Picture
Properties
“No” and press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (> 42,
Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The album name is automatically given.
Album (still picture) and picture
operation (@ right)
Change Date
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
You can go back to Album View.
Album View
For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and
press [OK].
≥Use blank discs or unfinalized discs on
which JPEG images are recorded with this
unit.
Copy to
DVD
[HDD]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Copy to HDD
To exit the screen
[RAM]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9274
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is
displayed]
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,
“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.
Deleting still pictures and music using
DELETE Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG) [SD]
Editing music
[HDD]
1
While stopped
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
press [OK].
3
[HDD] [RAM]
2
Editing an album
Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or
“Music”.
Press [3, 4] to select the album and
press [OPTION].
Editing a track
4 Press [OK].
1Press [3, 4] to select the album and press
5
Deleting an album
[OK].
2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [DELETE ¢].
[OPTION].
Deleting a still picture or track
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
which contains the still picture or track to
delete and press [OK].
∫ To edit the album (Music)
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture or track and press [OK].
Delete Album
Album and track operation (@ below)
Enter Album Name
Repeat Play Setting
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (> 40,
step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)
View” (> 40, step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View”
(Music) (@ left, step 3).
Useful functions during music play (> 32)
Track View
Sort
≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to
play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 27)
≥Playing still pictures (> 30)
VIDEO/PICTURE
@ below
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View” (Music)
(@ left, step 3).
∫ To edit the track (Music)
Delete Track
Properties
To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still
picture only]
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Album and track operation (@ below)
Enter Track Name
Enter Artist Name
Repeat Play Setting
Album View
Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
You can go back to Album View
Useful functions during music play (> 32)
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
The item is deleted.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Album and track operation
After performing step 1-3 (@ above)
Delete Album
Delete Track
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Enter Album Name
Enter Track Name
You can give names to albums and
tracks.
(> 42, Entering text)
Enter Artist Name
You can edit the artist name of the
track.
(> 42, Entering text)
Note
≥When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.
RQT9274
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
≥Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
3 Press [∫] (Set).
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
64 (44§)
Title
∫ To add a name
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 44
After entering the name (steps 1-2).
Playlist
64
Album of still pictures
Album ([HDD])
36
40
1
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].
≥Yo u can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
Track (CD/WMA/MP3) ([HDD])
Artist (CD/WMA/MP3) ([HDD])
Disc ([RAM])
40
40
64
∫ To recall an added name
§Title name for timer recording
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].
≥Yo u can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
press [OK].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
2
Title
Disc
44
40
∫ To delete an added name
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].
≥Yo u can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Press [RETURN].
[SD]
Characters
36
Album of still pictures
2
3
4
5
Note
≥If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
For your reference
1 Show Enter Name screen.
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (> 56). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview” window.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name”. (> 24, step 3)
Title
Enter Name
Chapter 1_
Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 36, step 4)
_
Playlist
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
ꢃ
/
9
ꢄ
ꢅ
$
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
Select “Enter Name”. (> 39, step 5)
*
%
Disc
i
7
&
Select “Disc Name”. (> 54, Providing a name for a disc,
step 1)
Album (CD/WMA/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 41, Editing music, step 3)
Track (CD/WMA/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 41, Editing music, step 3)
Artist (CD/WMA/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 41, Editing music, step 3)
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 40, Editing still pictures
(JPEG), step 3)
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Name
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
9
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
/
%
h
k
i
$
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
Delete
m
n
o
[
]
(
}
\
M
P
T
Add to List
Name List
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
)
-
v
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
S
SELECT
et
^
`
Space
RETURN
OK
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
5
J
K
N
Q
L
O
R
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3 Press [OK].
7
7
6 M
≥To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press
[OK].
7
RQT9274
P
7
8
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
opying
Copying titles or playlists
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
Advanced Copy
Features
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.
settings.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.
Copy direction
HDD > DVD
≤
≤
DVD > HDD
–
≤
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
High speed mode copy§1
≤
≤
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.
§2
Changing recording mode
Finalise§3
–
≤
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalised
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
Copying SD Video from an SD card
([EH69]) (> 47)
Copying playlists§4
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
–
–
≤
–
[HDD] [RAM] only
–
≤
≤
–
–
≤
≤
≤
§5
§5
–
–
–
§6
§7
§6
≤
–
§8
–
–
≤
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”.
>
58).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.
≥
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.
≥[EH69] SD Video titles copied to the HDD from an SD card.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (
>
56).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card ([EH69]).]
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (> 20).
– Still pictures cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
12X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed
DVD-RW§3
8X Speed
+R§4
4X Speed
+R DL§2
4X Speed
+RW
DVD-R§1
DVD-R DL§2
Recording
Recorded
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed
Mode
time
12 min.
6 min.
3 min.
2 min.
1 min. 30 s.
time
5 min. 46 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 21 s.
58 s.
time
time
time
time
time
XP
SP
LP
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
1 hour
5x
10x
24x
44x
62x
75x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 53 s.
4x
8x
16x
24x
32x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 57 s.
4x
8x
16x
24x
31x
8 min. 20 s.
3 min. 45 s.
1 min. 53 s.
7x
16x
32x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
4x
8x
16x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
4x
8x
16x
1
10x
20x
30x
40x
48 s.
≥The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list
supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is
written or unique feature on the disc.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
Note
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL
(single-sided, Double Layer)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow
“One time only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 78)
compatible DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from
the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to
the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 37).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only
recording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be
registered on the same copying list.
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal
speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL.
The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new
blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent
of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to
be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 11)
RQT9274
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
5 Press [OK].
Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 59) when:
– Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
– When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 59)
and you are copying in XP mode.
6
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-
only and you can no longer record or edit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Copy starts.
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following
table.
∫ To stop copying (> 45)
Rec for High Speed Copy (> 58)
Copy speed
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §
High speed
functions (> 46)
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
Normal speed
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
[OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
All Titles
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)
Title Name
§
Total
:
0
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
No. Channel Date Day Time
001
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
002
003
004
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
Properties
Page 01/01
Sort
OK
Grouped Titles
RETURN
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
Note
shown.
≥Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system
(PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit
cannot be copied.
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check
mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
≥[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still
pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
≥[-R] Still images (JPEG) cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with
video already recorded on it.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 11).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Note
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )”
in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 58).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (> 45).
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL are automatically finalised (> 78). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,
copy will not be performed.)
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to
DVD)” and press [OK].
COPY Navigator
HDD
All Titles
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)
No. Channel Date Day Time Title Name
Total
:
0
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
Page 01/01
OK
Select
OPTION
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
RQT9274
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
the check mark is cancelled.
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
” can be registered.
” or
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
“
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
registered.
” can be
See also “Before copying” (> 44).
≥To show other pages (@ below)
1
While stopped
5 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 46)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 46)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Copy” and press [OK].
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
HDD ꢀꢁDVD
Destination
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (> 58).
Copy Mode
2
VIDEO High Speed
0
Create List
3
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
OK
RETURN
press [OK] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (@ step 7).
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
4 Set the copy direction.
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (@ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”, or vice versa. (@ Go to step 6)
≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
5 Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (@ step 6).
∫ To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with “One
time only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely
copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that
are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and
remain on the HDD.
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (@ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the
point canceled are copied.
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
( 0%)
0MB
Size:
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
HDD ꢀꢁDVD
Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
2
Create List
3
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
OPTION
RETURN
∫ To return to the previous screen
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Press [RETURN].
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS].
Create List
HDD
All Titles
VIDEO Playlists
- - -
007
008
0:30(XP)
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
- - -
Note
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
OK
OPTION
Previous
Next
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press
[;].
RQT9274
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 58) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 58) of the Setup menu.
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
[+R]DL]
performed.
is displayed, but copy cannot be
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (>
20, When recording the “One time only recording”
broadcasts)
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. (> 20, When
recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts)
≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (> 15).
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (> 45, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks cannot
be selected.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
1 Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (@ step 2).
∫ Setting the unit to copy according to the set
Data size of each registered item
time
Size:
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Data size recorded to the copy destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the total
data size will change according to the
recording mode.
Size:
0MB (0%)
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
≥The total data size shown may be larger
than the sum of the data sizes for each
registered item, because of data
management information being written to
the copy destination, etc.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.
1 Copy Direction
DVD ꢀꢁHDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
Copy Mode
2
3
DVD-Video XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
Copy Time
Select the item in step 6–5(> 45)
Press OK to change the setting.
Start Copying
OK
1 Press [OPTION].
Add
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Delete
Move
[OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press
[3, 4] to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Delete:
Copying” and press [OK].
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
Move:
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (> 56).
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> 45)
3
When the top menu is displayed
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
03
04
Chapter
3
Chapter
4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
RQT9274
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to the previous screen
Copying SD Video from a video
equipment
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be
copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Note
≥The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
VIDEO§
SD Video
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 45,
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
REC
HDD
DVD-RAM
Copying SD Video from an SD card
[EH69]
USB Cable
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
≥This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD
card.
§DVD Video Recording format
Preparation
1
2
3
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.
Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for
data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
The display below automatically appears when you connect the
camera to this unit.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 45.
SD Video
VIDEO§
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
HDD
DVD-RAM
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
§DVD Video Recording format
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 45.
≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy
list.
≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”
SD Card
is not displayed.
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
SELECT
RETURN
OK
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (> 45)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source:SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format:VIDEO
≥SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
≥If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video
( MPEG2 )” is not displayed.
RQT9274
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/
CD-RW.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No.
Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD
Copy Mode
2
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Copying using the copying list
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [SD]
[RAM] > [HDD] [SD]
[SD] >[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
≥To show other pages (@ below)
6 Press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
≥To edit the copying list (@ below)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copy” and press [OK].
Copying” and press [OK].
Copy
≥Only when copying individual still pictures.
Except for [SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
Destination
Copy Mode
2
PICTURE High Speed
0
Create List
3
Folder
New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (@ step 7).
---
New folder
---
4 Set the copy direction.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (@ step 5).
press [OK] to start copying.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
9
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
To stop copying
5 Set the copy mode.
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (@ step 6).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Note
≥Still pictures copied from SD cards are grouped by the shooting
date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will
stop partway through.
6 Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (@ step 7).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
Copy
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still
pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
SD CARD HDD
≥[-R] Still images (JPEG) cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with
video already recorded on it.
Copy Mode
2
PICTURE High Speed
Create List
3
Page 01/01
To show other pages
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
OPTION
RETURN
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–4(for a still picture) (@ left)
Delete All
or 6–6(for a folder) (@ above)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Add
Delete
[OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥To show other pages (@ right)
≥To select another folder (> 49)
4 Press [OK].
RQT9274
≥To edit the copying list (@ right)
5 Press [2] to confirm.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add:
Copying using the copying list
Add new items to the copying list.
[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
1
While stopped
necessary items.
Insert the USB memory (> 15).
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
The menu is automatically displayed. (@ left)
Delete:
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
Copy
After performing steps 1–3 (> 48, Copying using the copying list)
Cancel All
Source
USB
HDD
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
1 Copy Direction
USB HDD
Destination
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
0
Create List
3
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
3 Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
using the copying list” (> 48)
∫ To select another folder
After performing steps 6–2 (> 48, To register individual still
pictures)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
Note
Create List
SD CARD
Create List
SD CARD
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
≥Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
Folder
103__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will
stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
----
----
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures [EH69]
5:
[0] @ [0] @ [5]
15: [0] @ [1] @ [5]
115: [1] @ [1] @ [5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
[SD] > [HDD]
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still
pictures will be imported.
same list.
Copying still pictures on the USB
memory
1
While stopped
Insert the SD card. (> 15).
The menu is automatically displayed.
Copying all the still pictures
[USB] > [HDD]
SD Card
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 15).
SELECT
The menu is automatically displayed.
RETURN
OK
USB device
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy New
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
Copy New Pictures
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
Copy from
SD CARD
Copy to
HDD
RETURN
OK
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Copy from
USB
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
Copy to
HDD
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
Note
and press [OK].
≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30
SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
≥If the HDD space runs out or the number of files/folders to be
copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway
through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥Still pictures copied from SD cards are grouped by the shooting
date in the HDD.
RQT9274
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying music to HDD
You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
Note
Music CD (CD-DA)
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
WMA/MP3
You can copy MP3 or WMA files from the USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.
Copying music from a USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve
CD title information.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3/WMA) > [HDD]
You can copy MP3 or WMA files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will
automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted
CD.
≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
≥The maximum number of albums§ on HDD: 300
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the
newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal
database. This unit has an internal database containing information
for approximately 350,000 album titles.
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums§ that
can be recorded will be reduced.
§
Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be
treated as albums.
You can update the internal database (> 51).
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,
then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory or CD-R/CD-
RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL (> 15).
The menu is automatically displayed.
e.g.,[USB]
Copying music from a CD
USB device
[CD] > [HDD]
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
≥Audio quality: LPCM
≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
RETURN
OK
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
( MP3&WMA )” and press [OK].
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to
“USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High
Speed”, respectively.
1 Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
3 Register MP3 or WMA files for copy.
CD
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
Play Music
Copy Music
changes to it (@ step 4).
You can register WMA/MP3 files or folders.
≥WMA/MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Copy
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Track
Track/Folder
and press [OK].
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total = 0)
USB ꢀꢁHDD
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
Copy Mode
MUSIC High Speed
2
Create List
3
Page 01/01
P O W E R E D B Y
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
OPTION
RETURN
∫ To register individual WMA/MP3 files
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the WMA/MP3 file and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
5 Press [OK].
Recording starts.
≥To edit the copying list (> 51)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be
recorded.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9274
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
To update the Gracenote® Database
To update the database with information on CDs that were recently
released, follow the instructions below.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Track
Track/Folder
∫ Preparing the update data
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
USB ꢀꢁHDD
1
Visit the following website.
Copy Mode
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
2
Download the data to your USB memory.
≥USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.
≥Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.
∫ Updating the database on this unit
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
3
4
Turn on this unit.
Insert the USB memory (> 15).
The menu is automatically displayed.
6 Press [OK].
USB device
≥To edit the copying list (@ below)
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
7 Press [2] to confirm.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥For individual files only
When specifying an existing folder as the copying
destination
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
RETURN
OK
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press
[OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].
≥Updating takes up to 20 minutes.
≥Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead
while updating.
When creating a new folder as the copying destination
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
2 Enter the folder name (> 42, Entering text).
≥Once started, you cannot cancel updating.
A message appears when updating is finished.
Press [OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
7
press [OK] to start copying.
Note
To stop copying
≥Timer recordings do not start while updating.
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of
whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make sure
you download the latest version from the website.
≥Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted
after updating the database.
≥No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title
information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the
CD title information of that CD is added to the database by
updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/
album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)
≥Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading
the Gracenote® Database and providing it through the Web may be
discontinued without notice.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Note
≥The sequence in which the WMA/MP3 files are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If WMA/MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new WMA/MP3 files are recorded following the existing
WMA/MP3 files.
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 3–5 (for a WMA/MP3 file) (>
Delete All
50, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-
RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–6(for a folder)
(@ above).
1 Press [OPTION].
Add
Delete
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [3, 4] to select the WMA/MP3 file or folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2
Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 50, Copying music from a USB
memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
Note
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14),
copying will stop partway through.
RQT9274
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting
menus
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Using on-screen menus
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Soundtrack§
Common procedures
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V]
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Select the audio and language (@ below, Audio attribute,
Language).
Disc
1
Digital 2/0 ch
Soundtrack
DivX
Play
Off
Subtitle
Picture
Select the soundtrack number.
L R
Audio channel
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
Sound
Other
Subtitle§
[DVD-V]
Menu
Item
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (@ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
≥“Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Angle§ [DVD-V]
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
(> 26, Changing audio during play)
Source Select (DivX)
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
≥Automatic:
The constructing method of the DivX contents is
automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace:
Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.
≥Progressive:
Select when the disc contents were recorded using
progressive.
PBC (Playback control > 78) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (> 16) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Audio attribute
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:
Signal type
k (kHz):
Sampling frequency
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Number of bits
Number of channels
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
POL: Polish
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
FIN: Finnish
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
MAL: Malay
VIE: Vietnamese
¢:
Others
RQT9274
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
Repeat Play
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
WMA/MP3 (except [USB])
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
Other menu—Change the display position
Position
≥Track
[CD] [VCD] and WMA/MP3 (except [USB])
1–5:
Select “Off” to cancel.
The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Status messages
Playback NR
Press [STATUS].
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (> 78)
The display changes each time you press the button.
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB
memory
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
HDD
REC
PLAY
The remaining time appears here while
stopped.
Recording or play status/input channel
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (@ above) is set to “On”.]
STEREO
L R
TV audio type being received (@ below)
Selected audio type
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (> 78, Film and video).
DVD REC
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
Date and time
Remain
18:53:50 11.10.
13:50 XP
T1 0:05.14 XP T2 0:00.10 XP
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
Title number and elapsed time during recording/
Recording mode
to the right, then select “Auto”.
When the output signal is NTSC
≥When using Pause Live TV
The time when the picture currently displayed on the
television was broadcasted
≥Auto 1
(normal):
≥Auto 2:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto 1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Play 15:05:13
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto 1” and “Auto 2”, and
the content is distorted.
Live 15:10:46
Input NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
Current time
No display
Reduces the noise while recording.
≥Automatic:
≥TV audio type
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.
≥On:
Noise reduction works for input video.
≥Off:
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.
STEREO: STEREO stereo broadcast
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M 1: Monaural broadcast
§
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(> 60).
RQT9274
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH69 model only.
Setting the protection
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[RAM]
Common procedures
Preparation
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (@ left)
1
While stopped
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Protection” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Playback
Recording
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Disc Name
Copy
Others
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
On
Drive Select
OK
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Format Disc
RETURN
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management”, “DVD Management” or
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
“Card Management” and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Disc Name
Cartridge-protection and Card-protection
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Off
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
SELECT
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
OK
Format Disc
RETURN
PROTECT
unit.
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.
[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (@ above, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (@ left)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(> 42, Entering text)
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
Documentary
My favorite
01
01/02
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
02
Chapter
Chapter
1
2
Note
≥[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record
still images to that disc.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9274
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
Deleting all the contents—Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (> 54, Setting the protection).
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 54, Setting the protection).
Note
After performing steps 1–3 (> 54, Common procedures)
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (> 54, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [OK].
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
Press [RETURN].
press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
Note
Note
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be
deleted.
4 Press [OK].
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Note
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9274
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Note
Selecting the background style —Top
Menu
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately
four times).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).
After finalising
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(> 55) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically
([-R] [-RW‹V›]: about 5-minute chapters/[+R]: about 8-minute
chapters), if§
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 54, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
– the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode.
This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
§
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
1
2
3
Before
finalising
After
finalising
Display after finalising
01
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
≤
–
Title Name
–
≤
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 37,
Change Thumbnail)
≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
recorded on them.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first–Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 54, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (@ left)
before creating top menu.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
“Title 1” and press [OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (> 54, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment–Finalise
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
press [OK].
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (@ above)
before finalising the disc.
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
4 Press [OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (> 54, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
Note
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
Note
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
RQT9274
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
To change the tuning settings for individual programme
position
Common procedures
Manual Tuning
1
While stopped
Pos Channel CH
Pos Channel CH
1
2
3
ARD
ZDF
N3
4
2
5
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Pos
Channel
CH
1
ARD
4
Manual
Tuning
4
5
HR3
BR3
8
10
6
7
8
9
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
Fine Tuning
Mono
Auto
Off
SELECT
OK
RETURN
press [OK].
SELECT
10
Delete
Move
Add
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
RETURN : leave
press [OK].
Menus
Options
Tabs
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and
press [OK].
Setup
Remote Control
Clock
DVD 1
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Setting for Standby
Country
Tuning
New Zealand
Pos
To change the programme position in which
the TV stations are assigned
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the
number of the desired programme position and
press [OK].
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
DivX Registration
Initialize
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Channel
To enter or change the Channel of a TV
station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [OK].
If the Channel needs a blank space, select the
blank between “Z” and “¢”.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [OK].
CH
To enter newly available TV stations or
change the CH number of an already tuned
TV station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the CH number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Fine Tuning To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [OK].
Tuning
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
Manual Tuning
Video
To select the video system type
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
picture lacks colour, and press [OK].
≥Auto
This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and
SECAM signals.
System§
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.
Setup
Manual Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV
Tuning
≥PAL
Disc
For receiving PAL signals.
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Manual Tuning
Pos Channel CH Pos Channel CH
≥SECAM
For receiving SECAM signals.
This setting is also available when you select
the external input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3,
AV4) in step 1(➡ above).
In order to record properly, make the
appropriate settings to match the connected
equipment.
TAB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ARD
ZDF
N3
HR3
BR3
4
2
5
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SELECT
OK
RETURN
SELECT
OK
RETURN
10
Delete
Move
Add
Audio
To select the audio reception type
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select
“BG”, “I“, or “DK” and press [OK].
≥BG
PAL B,G
≥I
PAL I
≥DK
PAL D,K / SECAM D,K,K1
To delete a programme position
Mode§
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To add a blank programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Green” button.
To move a TV station to another programme position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
the “Yellow” button.
Mono
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound
is distorted due to inferior reception conditions,
or if you want to record the normal (mono)
sound during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM
broadcast, and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the new programme position to which you
want to assign the TV station and press [OK].
Note
≥When the unit sets itself automatically with VIERA Link function
(> 10), only deletion of the programme position can be performed.
§Only for Asia and Middle East
RQT9274
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV
You can restart auto channel setting if the setup (> 10) fails for
some reason.
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode.
(> 21, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA
Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later) compatible TV with a HDMI cable.
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV for the channels
in this unit’s channel coverage and copied through this convenient
function.)
[EP ( 6Hours )]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
[EP ( 8Hours )]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
When the confirmation screen appears
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than
when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.
[For]New]Zealand]
If the country setting menu appears on the television
2 Press [3, 4] to select the country and press
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.
[OK].
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen§ or the Auto-Setup screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
[16:9]
[4:3]
≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec
for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded
in the original aspect ratio.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
§
Only for New Zealand.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Disc
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Chapter Creation
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 36)
Settings for Playback
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[Automatic]
[Off]
[5 minutes]
No chapter start points are set.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.
Do not forget your password.
Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted
(@ below).
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is effective when recording from a television
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[On]
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles.
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Change Password]
[Temporary Unlock]
– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio
set in “Aspect for Recording” (@ above).
– Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 59).
– You are no longer able to switch the audio
when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g.,
AV1, etc).
Soundtrack
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
[Off]
Subtitle
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X
discs).
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Maximum]
[Spanish]
[Normal ( Silent )]
The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
Menus
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
§
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (> 68) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (> 16).
[DVD-V]
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
RQT9274
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTS§
Picture
Select how to output the signal.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the
signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(> 60).
[Bitstream]
[PCM]
When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS
decoder.
[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this
setting.
When connected to equipment without a built-in
DTS decoder.
[Off]
Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Still Mode
MPEG§
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 78,
Select how to output the signal.
Frames and fields).
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be
seen clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The
picture is clearer and finer.)
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
MPEG decoder.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
§
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify
whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (> 78)
[LPCM] (> 78)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that
of normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (@ left).
[Off]
The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
Sound
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (> 23).
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[On]
[Off]
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
Bilingual Audio Selection
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (@ left).
≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (@ right, “Audio Mode for
XP Recording”).
Display
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
[M 1]
[M 2]
On-Screen Messages
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (@ right).
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.
[Automatic]
[Off]
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment
through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (> 64).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[On]
[Off]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(> 61) to “On”.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if
the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the
disc has copy protection.
[Bright]
[Dim]
[Automatic]
The display turns dark during play and disappears when
the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily if a button
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
is pressed. When Power Save settings (> 61)are
“On”, power consumption while in standby mode is
reduced.
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
Pause Live TV Icon
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen
icon while using the Pause Live TV function.
Dolby Digital§
Select how to output the signal.
[On]
[Off]
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
RQT9274
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Screen Saver
[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is
displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
HDMI Settings
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
[Off]
FUNCTION MENU Display
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must
also be 1080p compatible.
[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be
displayed. (> 7)
[Off]
[576i / 480i] [576p / 480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
Connection
[1080p]
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and
are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion
etc.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p / 480p or 576i / 480i).
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with
side panels.
Progressive
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma
television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1
( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical]
[Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an
amplifier with an optical digital audio
cable and connected to a TV with an
HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the
highest quality of audio from discs
(> 64).
[On]
[Off]
Note
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)
or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it
(> 53).
VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”
for component output (progressive output).
[PAL]
≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as
PAL 60.
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.
≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded
on the HDD.
[Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite
signal.
[S Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded
on the HDD.
[RGB 1 ( without component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
Note
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System”
settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording,
change back the settings before the recording starts.
[RGB 2 ( without component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Input
Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.
[Video]
[S Video]
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
RQT9274
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-
on-Demand (VOD) content (> 29).
Others
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Initialize
Remote Control
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic
products close together.
Shipping Condition§1§2
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset.
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
[Yes]
[No]
Default Settings§1§2
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
country settings§3, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
Remote Control
Setup
Press “ꢆ” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
[Yes]
[No]
Tuning
Disc
Picture
§1
§2
§3
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.
Only for New Zealand
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(@ step 2).
Note
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the
main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(@ step 2).
Clock
Clock
Time
15
Date
1
:
45
:
39
.
8
.
2009
Number
0
9
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
CHANGE
SELECT
OK
RETURN
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
2 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
3 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
Setting for Standby
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Power Save
[On] Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned
to standby (> 76).
[Off] This sets to Quick Start Mode.
≥Refer to the chart for the Power Save function features (> 10)
when the unit is turned off.
Auto Standby
Set the time to automatically turn the power off.
After the unit has finished operating, the power will be turned off
once the set time has passed.
[2 hours]
[Off]
[4 hours]
[6 hours]
The unit will not automatically turn off.
[For]New]Zealand]
Country
[Australia]
[New Zealand]
[Others]
RQT9274
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Settings
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
TV
Note
Í
Í
Channel
Select
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
VOL
CH
CH
DRIVE
Turn TV on/off
Input select
one that allows correct operation.
SELECT
AV
Volume
2 3
4 5 6
1
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
1 Point the remote control at the
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the
unit’s display.
television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01:
[0] @ [1]
10:
[1] @ [0]
Manufacturer and Code No.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
Code
01/02/03/04
35
Brand
Code
05/28
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
05/19/20/47
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”
disappears.
AKAI
27/30
24
36
33
BEJING
BEKO
33
NEC
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX
74
BENQ
58/59
NOKIA
25/26/27/
60/61
BP
09
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
10
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
45
ONWA
30/39/70
05
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
ORION
69
PEONY
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
05
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
64/65
05
05
37/38
52
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
05
10/34
61
05
RADIOLA
SABA
05
21
10
53
SALORA
SAMSUNG
26
63/67
32/42/43/
65/68
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
05
05
36
09
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
05/69/75/
76/77/78
HIKONA
HITACHI
52
SELECO
05/25
18
05/22/23/40/ SHARP
41
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
05
08
JINGXING
TCL
31/33/66/
67/69
JVC
17/30/39/70
TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
KDS
52
TEVION
52
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
52
62
10/15/44
16/57
05
05/50/51
07/46
LOEWE
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
RQT9274
MAG
52
YAMAHA
18/41
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Additional connections
Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
Y
COMPONENT
R
L
VIDEO IN
PB
PR
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
Component video
cable
R
L
IN
IN
Audio cable
S Video cable
RF
IN
Y
Audio cable
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (> 78) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
Required setting
“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (> 60)
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned
about it (> 53). This is the same for multi system televisions using
PAL mode.
CRT
DO NOT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Progressive output
This unit
RQT9274
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting an amplifier with a digital
input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
Connecting a stereo amplifier
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
Required setting
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 59)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 60).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R
L
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
Audio cable
Amplifier’s rear panel
OPTICAL IN
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
This unit’s rear panel
Y
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [> 34, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI cable
HDMI AV OUT
Receiver’s rear
panel
Required setting
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI
and Optical” (> 60).
RF
IN
Y
(The default setting is “HDMI and
Optical”.)
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Note
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 78) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be
output.)
RQT9274
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a television and VCR
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
To household mains socket
[For]New]Zealand]
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
To the aerial
R
L
[For\Saudi\Arabia[
BE SURE TO
READ THE
CAUTION FOR
THE AC MAINS
LEAD ON PAGE
2 BEFORE
CONNECTION.
Other connections
(> 9, 63)
1
5
6
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
[For]Middle]East]
Use the AC mains lead that matches
the socket for the area you live in.
[For]Asia]
Audio/Video cable
(included)
AC mains lead with a label is for
Thailand.
Aerial cable
AC mains lead without a label is for
areas other than Thailand.
RF
IN
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Cooling fan
RF coaxial cable
DO NOT
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV
selector or video cassette recorder to the
television, video signal will be affected by
copyright protection systems and the picture
may not be shown correctly.
2
3
4
Audio/Video cable
Television
RF coaxial cable
(included)
VCR
This unit
VHF/UHF
RF OUT
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there
are both television and VCR input terminals.
R
L
RF IN
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
VCR’s rear panel
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.
Required setting
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 60)
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
Required setting
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (> 60)
RQT9274
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit
operations.
Recording
Set up
Can I record from a commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy
What equipment is necessary to play multi
channel surround sound?
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without
other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI
cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in
(Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 64)
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
be played on other equipment?
¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players
after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the
condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible
equipment.
Are the headphones and speakers directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
the amplifier etc. (> 64)
The television has both S VIDEO IN and
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals. Which terminal
should I connect with?
Can a digital audio signal from this unit be
recorded to other equipment?
¾ Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a
more vivid picture compared to connecting with the S Video out
terminal.
¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,
change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the
Setup menu. (> 59)
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector
compatible with progressive scan, connect through the
component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using
PAL mode that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot
recommend progressive output as some flickering can occur.
(> 63)
– PCM Down Conversion: On
– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is
permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a
sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
¾ You cannot record WMA or MP3 signals.
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during
recording?
¾ With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO]. (When
“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 26)
¾ With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you
cannot. Change before recording with “Bilingual Audio
Selection” in the Setup menu. (> 59)
Is my television progressive output compatible?
¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480
(525)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the
manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in
another country?
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to
“On” before recording the programme.)
¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region numbers are not
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 43)
supported by this unit.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region
number be played?
¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a
standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region
number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a
standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD
Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to
a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are
possible). (> 11–12)
¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording
compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW
discs.
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.
¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded
in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX,
MP3, WMA and still pictures (JPEG). (> 12, 14)
¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
RQT9274
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB
TV Channels
What can or cannot be done using the USB port
on this unit?
¾ You can play DivX, WMA, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a
USB memory. (> 28)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 49)
¾ You can copy WMA or MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.
(> 50)
Please tell me about TV reception channels.
¾ Channel coverage depends on the tuner system you use.
Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.
List of TV Reception Channels
[For]Asia]
Tuner
System
Channel
Coverage
VHF
UHF
CATV
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 47)
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
PAL–D,K,
SECAM–
D,K,K1
OIRT
R1–R12
21–69
44 MHz to
470 MHz
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 13)
PAL–B,G,H,
SECAM–B,G
CCIR
E2–E12 E21–E69
S01–S05
M1–M10
U1–U10
S21–S41
Music
What will happen if I try to record the same CD
multiple times?
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.
PAL–I
Hong
Kong
—
21
–
69
57
—
PAL–D
China
1–12
13–
Z1–Z35
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the
[For]New[Zealand]
disc or USB memory?
Tuner
Channel
Coverage
VHF
UHF
CATV
¾ No, you cannot.
System
PAL–B,G
New
Zealand
1–11
21–69
44 MHz to
470 MHz
[For]Middle]East]
Tuner
Channel
VHF
R1–R12
UHF
21 69
CATV
System
Coverage
PAL–D,K,
SECAM–
D,K,K1
OIRT
–
44 MHz to
470 MHz
PAL–B,G,H,
SECAM–B,G
CCIR
E2–E12 E21–E69
S01–S05
M1–M10
U1–U10
S21–S41
PAL–I
South
Africa
4–13
21–69
—
RQT9274
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the television
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 28)
Cannot finish recording completely.
Copy-protect signal was detected.
≥The programme was copy-protected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
recorded. Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 21)
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
Cannot record.
Maximum number of titles exceeded.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 19, 37, 55)
≥Use a new disc.
Cannot playback.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 60)
TV system is different from the setting.
To playback, please change the TV System in
Setup.
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 14)
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card. (> 15)
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 14)
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
[EH69]
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card. (> 15)
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match. (> 13)
Not enough space in the copy destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 19, 37, 41, 55)
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 46, 48, 51)
This is a non-recordable disc.
Unable to format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 15)
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW. (> 11)
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 55)
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management
in FUNCTION MENU.
Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours
( in SP mode ) is necessary.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 499.
Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD.
Please delete unwanted titles.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 19)
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) (> 29)
$
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
RQT9274
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
(“∑” stands for a number.)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5
seconds. (> 61)
HARD ERR§
NoERAS
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 15)
≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 5)
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its
recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the
message disappears.
PROG FULL§
REMOVE
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 25)
≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off.
SP 35:50
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
LP 151h
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is
displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP”,”LP” and the
numbers are examples.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 55)
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 11–12)
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 13)
F74
F75
U59
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
U76
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This is
displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display
clears you can use the unit again.
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.
U80
U81
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now press [Í/I]
on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 70)
H or F
≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform the
dealer of the service number when requesting service. (> 70–74)
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 62)
§
The message are alternately displayed.
RQT9274
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be
The following do not indicate a problem with this
ejected.
unit:
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
to eject the disc.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting
breaks.
≥Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save” is set to
“On”.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the
disc.
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10
seconds.)
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound.
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens after connecting
the unit.
Power
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
Status messages do not appear.
household mains socket. (> 8, 65)
¾ Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup
menu. (> 59)
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the
The grey background does not appear.
main unit to turn the unit on.
¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 59)
The power is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, this unit will be automatically set to
standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 34)
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the
unit on.
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically
turned to standby. For details please read the operating
instructions of the TV.
right.
Screen size is wrong.
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does
not have that function, set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to
“Off”. (> 53)
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 60)
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to
“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 60)
¾ By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a
chance that the recording will be made using the wrong aspect.
Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
(> 58)
Displays
The display is dim.
¾ Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. (> 59)
¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for
Recording” to “4:3”. (> 58)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (> 61)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
The time recorded on the disc and the available
time shown do not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is different from
the actual recording time or WMA/MP3 recording
time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It
does not increase if other titles are deleted.
¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.
¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after
recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200
times or more.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the
display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if
there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 60) Press [OK]
to return to the previous screen.
The recorded title is stretched vertically.
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in
the Setup menu.
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not be displayed
correctly.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 58)
– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a
chance that the recording will be made using the wrong
aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when
recording. (> 58)
Compared to the actual recorded time, the
elapsed time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to
one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56
seconds). This does not affect the recording.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
RQT9274
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
Cannot switch audio.
¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 53)
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is
selected.
When playing DVD-Video using progressive
output, one part of the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
¾ Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is
caused by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video,
but should be corrected if you use interlace output. (> 53)
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 59)
– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (> 58)
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an
HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set
to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables. (> 59, 64)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
There is no apparent change in picture quality
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
Operation
The images from this unit do not appear on the
television.
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (> 62)
¾ The remote control and main unit are
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT
terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on this unit. (> 8, 9, 63, 64,
65)
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is
correct.
¾ Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is
not progressive compatible. Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY)
on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The
system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 60)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that
matches with this unit’s TV system.
using different codes. Change the code
on the remote control. (> 61)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 4)
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 4)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again
after changing the batteries. (> 61)
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (> 62)
¾ The child lock function is activated. (> 62)
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly. (> 16, 17)
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to
disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
The picture is distorted during play, or video will
not play correctly.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavorable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one
minute, then reconnect it.
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Sound
2
No sound.
Low volume.
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about
5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation
does not work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 62)
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected
one. (> 8, 9, 59, 63, 64, 65)
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 26)
¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Cannot tune channels.
Cannot download channel presets from the
television.
¾ Check the connections. (> 8, 65)
¾ You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later)
compatible TV with a HDMI cable to download channel presets.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup
menu. (> 60)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only record either the main
or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for
High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 58)
RQT9274
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may
be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
Startup is slow.
¾ Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (> 61)
If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Standby Power Save” setting activated on the TV,
even with “Power Save” set to “Off”, when the TV is in Standby
mode, the unit may take some time to startup.
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or
use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost
programmes or discs. (> 55)
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high
speed mode.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance
of this unit.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to
“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 58)
¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours
or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy.
¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD
recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then
copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or
+RW discs with high-speed copy.
Recording, timer recording and
copying
When copying, it takes a long time even when
high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours
when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP ( 8Hours ) mode recording.
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be
recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 11)
¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. ([RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]) (> 55)
¾ The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the
disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 54)
¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times
they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 78)
¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the
number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or
use a new disc. (> 19, 37, 55)
¾ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images
recorded on it.
The DV automatic recording function does not work.
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (> 23)
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV
equipment appear on the television.
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may
not operate properly.
¾
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.
Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 19,
37, 55)
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV
tape. (> 23)
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire
disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 499.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating DVD-R, etc.
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you
can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound
of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is
not a problem.
¾
Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to record onto them if
you either insert and remove the disc or switch the unit on and off while
a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
Play
¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other
Panasonic DVD Recorders.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes
can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with
both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is
pressed.
Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 15)
¾ The disc is dirty. (> 15)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(> 11–12)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 23, 65)
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that
was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD
Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode. (> 58)
¾ You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you
purchased it. (DivX) (> 29)
Timer recording does not work properly.
[For]New[Zealand] G-CODE programming does not
work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 25)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 24)
¾ Set the clock. (> 61)
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is
pressed.
¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while
“Power Save” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (Quick Start
mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
The timer programme remains even after
recording finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
RQT9274
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable)
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching
layers. (> 11)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
Edit
Available disc space does not increase even after
deleting a title.
¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-
R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 19)
¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is
deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc
space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change
this setting. (> 58)
¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is
not defective.(> Cover)
Cannot edit.
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus
to make changes. (> 16)
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 19)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(> 15)
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
(> 52)
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (> 11–12)
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when
you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written
if there is an interruption to the power before this.
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
angles are recorded.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
You have forgotten your ratings password.
You want to cancel the ratings level.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,
then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit
at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on
the unit’s display).
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine
Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 37)
Quick View does not work.
¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
Cannot create a playlist.
¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title
also includes still pictures. Select them individually.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
– press [∫] several times.
Music
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
– open the disc tray.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
– [SD] ([EH69]) [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.
– if a recording or timer recording was executed.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
The Video CD picture does not display properly.
¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV
System” in the Setup menu. (> 60)
¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture
cannot be displayed correctly during search.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file or WMA tag of a WMA file is
not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can
be displayed with this unit.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 60)
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
RQT9274
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)
is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA
Link functions.
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
Cannot edit or format a card. ([EH69])
¾ Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the
“Write Protection Off” message sometimes appears on the
screen even when protection has been set.) (> 54)
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other than the main ones
to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock
settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled. (> 61)
The contents of the card cannot be read. ([EH69])
¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
¾ The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents
on the card may be damaged.)
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD
Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as
SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format. (> 13, 14)
¾ The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that
are not compatible with this unit. (> 13)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, country
settings§, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 61)
¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen§ or the Auto-Setup screen appears. All
the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
¾ You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2
GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to
32 GB.
§Only for New Zealand.
¾ This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4
on an SD card.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a
long time. ([EH69])
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take
a few hours.
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the
safety devices being activated
long time. Format the disc or card. (> 55)
¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
settings remain.)
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive
JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 14)
USB
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the
unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 15)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (> 13, 14)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 14)
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 13)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit
is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 60)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
¾ Some functions may not work depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports
“HDAVI Control 4” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the
power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI
Control” is working.
3
RQT9274
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precautions
Placement
Foreign matter
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric shock.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000–
2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
#6,304,523.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.
GracenoteR End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions
of this application or device.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-
commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
RQT9274
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
Video
Video system:
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
[For]New[Zealand]
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Recordable discs
Recording system:
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
[For]New[Zealand] Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
[For]New[Zealand] S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) :
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW:
+R:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R DL:
+RW:
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Television system
[EH69]
Maximum Approx. 567 hours with 320 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 71 hours, SP: Approx. 142 hours
LP: Approx. 284 hours, EP: Approx. 426 hours/567 hours
[EH59]
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours
LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours
[For]Asia]
Tuner system
PAL-D,K,
SECAM-D,K,K1
OIRT
Channel coverage
R1 to R12
21 to 69
VHF:
UHF:
Playable discs
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3§1, WMA§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1
PAL-B,G,H,
SECAM-B,G
CCIR
VHF:
UHF:
E2 to E12
E21 to E69
CATV: S01 to S05,
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, MP3§1, WMA§1
,
JPEG§1, DivX§1
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
M1 to M10, U1 to U10, S21 to S41
PAL-I
UHF:
21 to 69
Hong Kong
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, MP3§1, WMA§1
,
PAL-D
China
VHF:
UHF:
CATV: Z1 to Z35
1 to 12
13 to 57
1
JPEG§1, DivX§
RF converter output: Not provided
[For]New[Zealand]
Internal HDD capacity
Optical pick-up
[EH69] 320 GB
[EH59] 250 GB
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
Tuner system
Channel coverage
1 to 11
21 to 69
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
PAL-B,G
New Zealand
VHF:
UHF:
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz
RF converter output: Not provided
[For]Middle]East]
CD
DVD
Laser power:
780 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
Tuner system
Channel coverage
R1 to R12
21 to 69
PAL-D,K,
SECAM-D,K,K1
OIRT
VHF:
UHF:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz
Audio
Recording system:
Audio in:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
Output level:
Output impedance:
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
PAL-B,G,H,
SECAM-B,G
CCIR
VHF:
UHF:
E2 to E12
E21 to E69
CATV: S01 to S05, M1 to M10,
U1 to U10, S21 to S41
PAL-I
South Africa
VHF:
UHF:
4 to 13
21 to 69
RF converter output: Not provided
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
RQT9274
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SD Card ([EH69])
Slot:
Compatible media:
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Card§3, SDHC Memory Card,
MultiMediaCard
Format:
FAT12, FAT16§4
(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)
FAT32§4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Still picture (JPEG)
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
Number of pixels:
Between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096
sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Thawing time:
Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
Video (SD Video)§2
Codec:
File Format:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
USB port
Type A : 1 pc
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
USB standard:
Format:
Video (SD Video)§2
Codec:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
File Format:
Others
Region code:
[For]Asia]
[For]New[Zealand]
[For]Middle]East]
#3
#4
#2
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]
[For]New[Zealand]
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
Mass:
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 36 W
430 mmk59 mmk326 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)
Approx. 8 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
§1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
§2Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc, the playback is possible.
§3 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
§4 Long file name is unsupported.
≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)
RQT9274
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Bitstream
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
u
r
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich,
natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal
colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep
Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not
support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate
output to suit the connected TV.]
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information
can be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD)([EH69]). These perform the reading and
writing of data.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
Video:
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL on this unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
Folder
RGB
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card ([EH69]) where
groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to
the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards ([EH69]) and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit.
RQT9274
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
WMA
WMA is a compression format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
It achieves the same sound quality as MP3 with a file size that is
smaller than that of MP3.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
RQT9274
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Enabling discs to be played on
other equipment-Finalize . . . . . . . . . 56
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 58
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–25
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 53
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Album (Still picture)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Audio
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 78
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 78
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 21, 22
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . 7, 33
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . 9, 34–35, 60, 64
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 60, 64, 78
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 30–31, 78
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 22
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Subtitle
Language
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Channel
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 78
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 36
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 58
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connection
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–29
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
WMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mode
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 65
Amplifier, system component,
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 32
Music on HDD
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–25
Tuning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 64
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 9, 63–65
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Copy
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 37
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
USB
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 37
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 34–35, 60, 64
WMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 32
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 37
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 59, 60
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 27, 30, 36, 40
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–12
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 28–29, 78
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 60, 78
Properties
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 40
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Protection
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Panasonic Corporation
p
RQT9274-L
F0209MT0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|